JP7374812B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to be executable based on seven symbols being stopped and displayed on a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the jackpot start performance, a right-hitting instruction is given to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right by operating the ball firing handle. There is still room for improvement regarding instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute an instruction urging a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) Variably displaying multiple types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and providing an advantage to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. A gaming machine that can be controlled in a state,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
A specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information and then resumes the variable display after the variable display of the performance identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests temporary suspension of the specific performance identification information;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies temporary suspension of the specific performance identification information;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of the predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and the second period is during the predetermined period and is subsequent to the first period. , performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display, and in a subsequent period, performing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display;
The suggestive performance execution means sets the specific performance identification information and performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first state with low visibility by effect display, and then sets the specific performance identification information and the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first state with lower visibility than the first state. It is possible to execute a production that sets the second state as the suggestion production,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible,
The special performance execution means is capable of executing, as the special performance, a performance that displays a display corresponding to the restart of the variable display,
The display area of the effect display is larger in the second state than in the first state,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine is capable of variably displaying multiple types of production identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling the player to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. And,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
A specific performance that executes a specific performance that temporarily stops special identification information different from the performance identification information and then restarts the variable display from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result. execution means and
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests temporary suspension of the special identification information;
a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify temporary suspension of the special identification information;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of the predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and the second period is during the predetermined period and is subsequent to the first period. , performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display, and in a subsequent period, performing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display;
The suggestive performance execution means executes a performance in which the special identification information and the performance identification information are set to a first state with low visibility by displaying an effect and then set to a second state with even lower visibility than the first state. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned suggestive performance,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
The special performance execution means is capable of executing, as the special performance, a performance that displays a display corresponding to the restart of the variable display,
The display area of the effect display is larger in the second state than in the first state,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) variable display of multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) is performed, and display results are derived and displayed in an advantageous state advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part where saturated lines are continuously displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification may be executed). (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, the player's expectation for the temporary stop can be increased by the suggestive effect, and the exhilaration of the player for the temporary stop can be increased by the execution of the notification effect. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to the following means A to B. Conventionally, it has been possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns (performance identification information) in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-131876, and pseudo-continuous patterns (specific There is a device that can execute a pseudo-continuous performance (specific performance) that includes temporarily stopping (performance identification information) and re-variable display.

However, since no effect is performed when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, not only is it not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous pattern to temporarily stop, but also it is not possible to increase the player's expectations for the pseudo-continuous pattern to temporarily stop. However, there is a problem in that it is not possible to increase the player's sense of excitement.

This invention was made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's sense of expectation and also increase a player's sense of exhilaration. .

The gaming machine of means A is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification may be executed). (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a jackpot, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a loss. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a timing chart of the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance contents in a pseudo continuous performance. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for execution of a pseudo continuous performance), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a preview performance and the determination ratio of the preview performance to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification performance execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification performance period determination ratio. It is a figure showing the output mode of the sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion production period when a pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is an explanatory diagram of the change in the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs a pseudo continuous effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of image data configuring display on an image display device in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of concentrated lines and effect images in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which performs the pseudo continuous effect in a modification.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol” or “first special symbol,” and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “first special symbol.” It is also called ``2nd special pattern'' or ``2nd special pattern.'' Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

In addition, the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. For example, reach effects include normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5, etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to the small win gaming state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line and storing them in internal memory. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 10-4), and the big winning hole door changes between an open state and a closed state (hereinafter referred to as (usually referred to as the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 10-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) and a jackpot determination random number, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 10-8 (A) are set), and a table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 10-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIGS. 10-11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is immediately terminated.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). Thereby, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the production control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 10-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 10-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the Aim for V effect (see Figure 10-43). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 10-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see Figure 10-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot game state (FIGS. 10-46 and 10). -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. Suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion effect. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of production, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the specified command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the production control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 10-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in FIG. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 10-22(A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are lit up by white painting as shown in Figure 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 10-23 to 10-33 and FIGS. 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). Note that the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a reservation memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-23 (b1) to FIG. 10-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 and lights up the right hit display. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the production control CPU 120 inputs the data of each production shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses text and graphic image displays as described later in Figures 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 10-25 (c3), following Figure 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example "BONUS!!" of the character image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Figure 10-24 (c4) to Figure 10-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed player") are used as an effect to promote right-handed players. ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 10-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows data in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is specified at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all RGB data are specified. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 10-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the production control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), the presentation mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "right" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion performances.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for playing right-handed) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be made so as not to interfere with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round starts as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As mentioned above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. It should be noted that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed at the top right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during the 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image for promoting a small right hit ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) specifying after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a text image "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed together with a character image so as to overlap a background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be performed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is subsequently displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V-winning effect is executed, a " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-46 (f1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 10-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a reservation storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 10-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are executed during the round as shown in Figures 10-40 to 10-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), an effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in Figure 10-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the round after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect aimed at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and the jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power outage 7 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in the 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 10-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in Figure 10-58, when a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 10-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature section 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the production and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion production),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the V-aiming effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state has ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the big right-handed promotion effect. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player This can prevent you from feeling bothered by it. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed hit promotion effect involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song) is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen for selecting a performance mode is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, you may use a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuation notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In either case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using an image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a path leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right hit!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, an image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas an image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in Figure 10-39 (d3) to Figure 10-47 (f4) (from t4 in Figure 10-20 to Figure 10-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot for one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R will make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a probability-variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the sound will be emitted from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

As in the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion performance is continued while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare performance, and then, after that, as shown in Figure 10-24 After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hit promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion effect may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. The area where saturated lines are continuously displayed) is an example of a gaming machine.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop through the suggestive effect, and by executing the notification effect, it is possible to increase the player's sense of elation over the temporary stop. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification may be executed). (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, the player's expectation for the temporary stop can be increased by the suggestive effect, and the exhilaration of the player for the temporary stop can be increased by the execution of the notification effect. By continuing to display the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and the player's feeling of disappointment at the failure to make the temporary stop is alleviated. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In other words, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized on the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the first guide display is By instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience by not emphasizing the instruction too much, and also to display the second guidance display first. and modestly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, then have the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after having the player recognize it, use the first guidance display to firmly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. In addition, even if the specific production identification information or special identification information does not temporarily stop, the effect display will continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed, so the effect display will be suggested by the lingering effect. The performance can make a strong impression on the player, and the player's sense of disappointment can be alleviated compared to the case where the effect display ends immediately after a predetermined timing has passed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, allows players to easily understand instructions on the direction in which game balls should be fired in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the performance.

Further, even if visibility is reduced when performing a suggestive effect, it is preferable that the guide display continues to be displayed without reducing visibility. By doing so, instructions can be given to the players in an easy-to-understand manner and the game becomes more interesting.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are displayed in a variable manner. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that derives and displays results and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. The area where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines are examples.

moreover,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification may be executed). (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed) and gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

FIG. 11 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 11(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 12, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 193SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the feature section 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 193SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained.

Type 1 gaming machine is
Multiple types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed, display results are derived and displayed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is generated. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
As a variable display, a specific performance (for example, a pseudo continuous display) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result, and then restarts the variable display. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing the effect (effect);
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is configured to reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive performance, and then reduce the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the current state (for example, as shown in FIGS. after reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35). , a portion where the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, displays the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. (areas where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and it is possible to increase the elation of the player for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can variably display multiple types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns), derive and display display results, and control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) machine 1),
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the performance identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the display result is derived and displayed. A specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that restarts the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Notification performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 13 part) and
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means, as the suggestive performance, once reduces the visibility of the performance identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility even further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, by displaying concentrated lines at the density D1 on the image display device 5, the left and right After reducing the visibility of the decorative pattern, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2),
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification may be executed). (a portion in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying them in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and continues to display the effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing if the special identification information does not temporarily stop. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can be displayed even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. (parts where saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and also to increase the player's sense of elation for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect. If the player does not make a temporary stop, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made, and reducing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop. Since the player's feelings can be alleviated, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Type 3 gaming machine is
If the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive performance execution means includes a predetermined method for temporarily stopping the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-48 as modification example 193SG-1, the part where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5);
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1 or embodiment 2, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

Type 4 gaming machine is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. Before the switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D1. (The part where the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the image data switching timing)
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the predetermined timing when the specific production identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, so that the specific production identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop. By making players aware of this, and by increasing attention to the background image that is easily visible through the effect display, the game can be improved even if the specific production identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped. It can alleviate people's feelings of disappointment.

Type 5 gaming machine is
The suggested effect execution means causes the effect display to be temporarily stopped at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops; Delete any performance identification information (or performance identification information) different from the specific performance identification information before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 14-44, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop) In the "Medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative pattern with a number other than "1", which is a jackpot combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, stops. ),
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the performance identification information from being mistakenly recognized as a temporary stop.

Form 6 gaming machine is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(G) to 14-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is located at a production position (for example, the first production position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information). Equipped with an operable movable body (for example, second movable body 193SG033),
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the temporary stop can be further impressed on the player by the movement of the movable body and the modification of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

Type 7 gaming machine is
The movable body is
The first action (for example, movement from the evacuation position to the first presentation position shown in Figure 14-2) has a smaller area overlapping with the specific presentation identification information (or the special identification information) than the first movement. It is possible to perform a second operation (for example, movement from the retreat position to the second production position shown in FIG. 14-2),
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35(F), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect) ),
The gaming machine according to aspect 6, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body, and to impress upon the player that the temporary stop has been made.

Form 8 gaming machine is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
In the first operation, the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped). The part that lights up with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The gaming machine according to aspect 7, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, the presentation effect can be improved.

Type 9 gaming machine is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, Fig. 14-35 (F) and Fig. 14-35 (G) As shown in , the part in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retracted position before the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to embodiment 7 or embodiment 8, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will be deleted.

The game machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-35(G) to 14-35(H)). , the part where the pseudo-reen pattern cracks and explodes),
A display corresponding to a specific performance (for example, a display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) indicating that the N+1st variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped. A display device corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13),
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) capable of operating at a performance position (for example, a first performance position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific performance compatible display displayed by the specific performance compatible display means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 9, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light emitting part (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034) that can emit light,
The light emitting unit emits light in a manner according to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it emits light in blue; when displaying "x3", it emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific effect display. (The part that lights up the second movable body LED193SG034 in green, and in red to display "x4"),
The gaming machine according to aspect 10, characterized in that:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to draw attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive performance is executed, the special performance (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) A special effect execution means capable of executing (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13);
Equipped with
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed with priority over the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed instead of a normal decorative pattern). (a portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below);
The special performance execution means executes, as the special performance, a first performance period (for example, FIG. 14- As shown in 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) at the predetermined timing because the temporary stop did not occur at the predetermined position. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) and the second performance period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion performance) As shown in FIG. 14-33, FIG. 14-35, and FIG. 14-44, a portion where a concentrated line is displayed while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop due to the special effect. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
The special performance executing means is configured to add, as the special performance, the second performance at a position different from the predetermined position to the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position. It is possible to execute an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a translucent state is displayed in duplicate at a position corresponding to a period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5). ),
The gaming machine according to aspect 12, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the transition to the second performance period can be made even more natural.

The gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means can combine and display images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, image data 1, image data 2, image a portion that can be displayed on the image display device 5 by combining data drawn as data 3 and image data 4),
The drawing layer in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer in which the effect display of the suggested effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 14-3 As shown in , a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggestive performance. ) and the degree of freedom in special effects can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed and then moved and erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (G) ) ~ As shown in Figures 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I), and 14-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed moving toward the player after it explodes with a crack. (the part that is hidden),
A specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", " further comprising a specific performance compatible display means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13) capable of displaying a display such as "x4",
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-37, displaying "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) (the part that is moved and displayed toward the player and then hidden),
The production identification information in the N+1 variable display becomes visible from when the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until the display corresponding to the specific production is erased (for example, As shown in 14-37(O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 14, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the performance effects of the notification performance and the display corresponding to the specific performance can be enhanced, and the performance identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific performance is erased, so that the variable display can be restarted. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
A preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that foretells that the advantageous state is likely to occur using the performance identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13) part),
The preview performance execution means limits the execution of the preview performance when the display corresponding to the specific performance is deleted (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start number notification performance is " ×2,” “×3,” and “×4” are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect);
16. The gaming machine according to aspect 15.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the user from not being able to easily recognize that the variable display will be resumed due to the execution of the preview effect.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
Both the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific production corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing the game (for example, if the pseudo continuous symbol explodes and the game starts (the part where the display moves towards the player side, and the part where the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move towards the player side),
The gaming machine according to Form 15 or Form 16, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast wave shown in Modification 193SG-4) A special effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a part that displays a visibility-obstructing image such as an image),
The specific effect execution means makes visible the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see due to the special effect (for example, in Modification 193SG). -4, the part where re-variable display is performed after hiding the visibility-obscuring image),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 17, characterized in that:
According to this feature, before the display including the performance identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display starts, a special performance in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) becomes difficult to see is executed. It is possible to easily understand that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
image display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying variable display of the production identification information and production display of each production;
A board material provided on the player side of the image display means and having a transparency that allows the player to see the display of the image display means, and capable of displaying the special image by inputting light from the outer circumferential side. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification Example 193SG-4),
Equipped with
In the special performance, the special performance execution means makes the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a visibility inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 can be viewed from the player.) (parts that are difficult to see),
19. The gaming machine according to aspect 18.
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, it is possible to enhance the player's impression, and therefore it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the special performance.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
In the case where the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the same as the moving speed of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing. Different from the movement speed of the performance identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, The movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of temporary stopping.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the speed of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined temporary stop position before the predetermined timing is as follows: The specific production identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-5, Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward to the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing, and the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing, and the (the part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-repeat pattern different when returning to the previous section),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 20, characterized in that:
According to this feature, the player can easily understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position or the movement back after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
The suggestive effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position (for example, according to Modification Example 193SG). -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentrated line is not displayed again),
22. The gaming machine according to aspect 21.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand that the person is moving back after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed before the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops is the same as that of the specific production identification information after the temporary stop. The performance identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving speed (for example, as shown in FIG. However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or the movement after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The moving direction of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific production identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, , as shown in Figures 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player (towards the player). (the part that moves),
24. The gaming machine according to aspect 23.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it even easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of movement.

FIG. 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in this feature section 193SG. As shown in FIG. 14-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is equipped with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 is built in the second movable body 193SG033 to cause the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light. Note that the second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 during non-operation is located at a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position) between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Incidentally, in the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this characteristic part 193SG is used as a jackpot notification during the variable display, during execution of the temporary stop notification effect described later, the first variable display start number notification effect, and during the reach effect of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 14-2. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Among these, when executing the temporary stop notification effect and when executing the first variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves the image display device 5 from the retracted position as shown in FIG. 14-2(B). While moving (operating) to the first performance position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach performance of Super Reach, the second movable body 193SG003 moves as shown in Figure 14-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second presentation position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and is located above the first presentation position.

Although not particularly shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first presentation position or the second presentation position is configured to return from the first presentation position or the second presentation position to the retracted position again as a predetermined period of time passes. It has become.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a part thereof overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern when viewed from the front. (See Figure 14-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the second performance position is limited to only when the jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first presentation position is also an operation in which the area overlaps with the pseudo-continuous pattern is larger than that of movement from the retraction position to the second presentation position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the main characteristic section 193SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3(A) to 14-3(D) and FIGS. 14-4(A) to 14-4(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 14-3 shows the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 193SG (see FIG. 14-35), and FIG. 14-4 shows the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), image data 1 displays a pseudo continuous pattern (this feature This data is drawn in order to display a temporary stop suggestion image that suggests that the symbol (in which the symbol "NEXT" is displayed) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

In addition, the pseudo-series pattern in this characteristic part 193SG is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggestion performance or a temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative pattern. This is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo-continuous display) of a decorative pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern that is different from the decorative pattern and is a pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or temporary stop notification performance, which will be described later. It may be.

Furthermore, in the present feature section 193SG, a form has been exemplified in which the pseudo continuous pattern is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance as part of the decorative design. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display together with the normal decorative pattern even during the temporary stop suggestion performance or the temporary stop notification performance.

Furthermore, if the pseudo-connected pattern is to be a different pattern from the decorative pattern, the normal decorative pattern (the pattern with the numbers "1" to "9" in the main characteristic part) is temporarily stopped in the center of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to a pseudo-continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B) and FIG. 14-4 (A), image data 2 includes the above-mentioned pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the top of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This data is drawn to display a moving display of , and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the data is drawn from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. This data is drawn in order to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 193SG).

In addition, the image data 2 displays a swinging display of decorative symbols in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion production is executed, and also displays the non-operation of the temporary stop suggestion production. At the time of execution, it is also image data that displays a variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(B), the image data 3 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 14-3(C) and 14-4(C), the image data 4 is transmitted from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display This is data drawn to display concentrated lines toward area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Although not particularly illustrated, the image data in the feature section 193SG includes, in addition to image data 1 to image data 4, image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in this feature section 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the image based on image data 2 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the top to the bottom) is changed to image data 4, as shown in Figure 14-3 (D). The image based on image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image based on image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern) is The image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4 (the saturated line), and the image based on image data 2 (display moving downward from the top of the decorative pattern) is displayed with priority over the image based on image data 4. The image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4 are displayed with priority.

Note that the concentrated line in the main characteristic portion 193SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%). For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 (C) and 14-4 (D), while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, the player can pass through the concentrated line through decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols, temporary stop suggestion effects, etc. The image can be viewed.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop. In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is executed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 14-33) of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIG. 14-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped (FIG. 14-4) shown in FIG. 14-4.

FIG. 14-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 193SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-5(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 14-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) and a small hit as a determination result at the time of winning. It is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-5(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-7(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 193SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 14-7(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 14-8(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 193SG selects one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 193SG using FIG. 14-8(B), in this feature section 193SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in the feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 14-9). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 193SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-8 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-9 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although this feature section 193SG provides two types of normal reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. It is also possible to use only the types. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

In addition, the fluctuation patterns in this feature section 193SG include a special winning fluctuation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation patterns in this feature section 193SG include a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and variable-displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the feature section 193SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-10, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B, select Variation Pattern Judgment Table B for Jackpot, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot) using the corresponding Jackpot Variation Pattern Judgment Table B. (variation pattern), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance, 3-time jackpot) ).

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, if we pay attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability variable jackpot B, there are more pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to implement. Therefore, this feature section 193SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for miss, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. It is determined from PA2-1 (a time-saving shortening variation pattern that is out of reach) and PA2-1 (a variation pattern that is out of normal reach).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling effect operations, such as the area shown in FIG. 14-11 (A) for holding data for effect control. Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 14-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 193SG191, a production control timer setting section 193SG192, a production control counter setting section 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 193SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 193SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section 193SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 193SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characteristic section 193SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of the feature section 193SG, it is stored whether or not the display pattern has not yet been determined in conjunction with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 11). In other words, due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the display pattern has not yet been determined because the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. A display undetermined flag indicating the , and a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, respectively corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with a buffer number.

In addition, the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this feature section 193SG has a storage area so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the production restriction flag means that in the command analysis process (Figure 14-18), a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, but the symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and number of pending memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not a target of the prefetch preview performance when the notification command is not received within a first pending storage number notification waiting time or a second pending storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the main feature section 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be explained based on FIG. 14-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (Step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (Step 193SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 of , and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage section.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 193SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 193 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 14-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 14-13 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIGS. 14-15) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 193 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section, etc. 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 193SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 193SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission settings of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, are executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or not (step 193SGS128). 193SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 193SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , a failure variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but among these failure variation pattern determination tables A to C, failure variation pattern determination table A is For example, 498 (approximately 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take, and the variation pattern for failure is In determination table B, 598 (approximately 60%) determination values from 0 to 597 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 (approximately 70%) determination values from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 100 (approximately 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 are selected from the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. is assigned.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 193SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine when a starting prize is won.

In addition, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 193 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS135), and step Proceed to 193SGS138.

Further, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B (Step 193SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is Probable Variable Jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (Step 193SGS137) and proceeds to Step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 193SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 14-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count and the total pending memory count are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. good. In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability). , In the process of step 193 SGS 150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each of the jackpot types "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is set, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 193SGS155). Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small win" (step 193 SGS 150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. If the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result should be a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

If it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and whether to control to the small winning gaming state (whether the small winning flag is turned on or not). A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not the jackpot is played or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 193SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 193SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small win", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small prize symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 193SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIGS. 14-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probable variable jackpot C", that is, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "non-probable variable jackpot B", or "non-probable variable jackpot B". If it is either "probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), jackpot variation pattern determination table A or jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot, and determine whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B". ”, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special winning variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination at step 193SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to a probability variable state or a time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of multiple types. and set (step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. The error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the error pattern (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern stored in a random number buffer for variation, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193 SGS 175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 193SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIGS. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is also turned on. It is determined whether or not there is one (step 193 SGS 183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, settings are made to the production control board 12 to transmit a winning start 5 designation command corresponding to the small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small winning display time is set in the small winning display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Further, the number of openings (for example, two times) is set in the number of openings counter for the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 193SGS182; Y). 193SGS184), hit start 1 specified command (probable variable jackpot A), hit start 2 specified command (probable variable jackpot B), and hit start 3 specified command (probable variable jackpot C) depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. ), settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 193 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 193SGS189), which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0". If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time saving number of times remains and is in a high base state, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 193SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 193SGS195), the process advances to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is probability variable jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process advances to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 14-18, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS237; Y), the display undetermined flag of the entry in which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is ended.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 193SGS222). When it is the first starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 193SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 193SGS224). When it is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), a second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). If it is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is turned on (step 193SGS232).

If the received command at step 193SGS226 is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the received command at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or at step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, by the time the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time elapses, the first or second pending memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (Step 193SGS235; Y), the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

FIGS. 14-19 are part of a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of a prefetched preview performance and the performance pattern of the prefetched preview performance (the display pattern of the reserved memory display) in the prefetched preview setting process (S161); Next, a pending display update process is performed to update the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the storage content of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 14-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 14-20, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined based on whether the value of the production control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process advances to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS240b). In addition, the first variable display start number notification effect is the start of the variable display again as a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in Figure 14-29 (E), Figure 14-30 (L), and Figure 14-31 (S). This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the display is displayed. Further, in step 193SGS240a, it may be determined whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step By proceeding to 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the pending display flag, as will be described later. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect, the pre-read preview effect is not executed.

In step 193SGS241, the production control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winnings, depending on whether there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242) .

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is ended, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , Determine whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation command or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is the symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is , is set in the pending display flag. In other words, the pre-read preview performance is not executed for the pending memory that will result in a probability variable jackpot C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (any of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or non-probable variable jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting section, and the jackpot type specified in step 193SGS244, the pre-read notice at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is generated. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(A), the presence or absence of a pre-read preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area 193SG5U. If the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or in the second pending memory display area 193SG5D. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than guaranteed variable jackpot C, the pre-read preview effect will not be determined to be non-executable, and the pre-read preview effect will always be decided to be executed and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (notice type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", the proportion of display patterns β determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by the display pattern α. The percentage is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" or "non-probable variable jackpot", the proportion at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The percentage of probability-variable jackpots A increases, and the player's expectations for the probability-variable jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability-variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the advance notice performance. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β that is displayed in a white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is likely to be a variable jackpot C. Even if it is a "jackpot" other than the above, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect, as in the case where the variable display result is a "miss".

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting section, for example, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, the outlier (not shown) is selected. By referring to the pre-read preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D or the second pending memory display area 193SG5U.

As shown in Figure 14-21 (B), if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than when the is ``non-reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to the highest value, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest value.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-21 (A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be executed (no preview effect). The rate at which the preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is that the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any variable pattern category is determined when the variable display result is “miss”. The percentage is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot (Probability Variable A)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which the display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probable variable jackpot A". Since the percentage becomes higher, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 193SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 193SGS249).

After executing step 193SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending memory display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, in step 193SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 193SGS250) and proceeds to step 193SGS251.

In addition, after executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undetermined flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the starting prize-winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is The pending display of the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the first special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the pending display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will change according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. For example, one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one pending storage display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the pending memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this feature section 193SG) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the pending memory.

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U are also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5D and It will now be displayed in the memory display area 193SG5U.

Note that in this feature section 193SG, a mode is illustrated in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 193SG5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 193SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning is performed in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 193SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing Step 193SGS272 or Step 193SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (Step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. A combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned chance (lost symbols) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview effect determination process for variable display that executes a pseudo continuous effect (for when pseudo continuous effect is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview effect during the variable display and the preview effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to perform a special temporary stop notification performance instead of the temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification performance is a performance that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo-continuous performance. , the special temporary stop notification effect means that, in addition to outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative pattern has been temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first time, the second special background image if it is the second time, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third time). This is a performance that informs the player.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). When it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193 SGS 283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview effect determination process for a variable display that does not execute a pseudo continuous effect is executed, and during variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview effect and the preview effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in any one of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 193SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 193SGS289). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data and starts the next process again. The variable display of decorative patterns is executed by starting a timer and controlling the presentation device according to the following process data so that there is no next process data. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is possible to execute the preview performance execution process for executing the preview performance in the variable display performance process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. First, as shown in Figure 14-23 (A), if the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during variable display, first, after reaching reach, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. A suggested temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In addition, the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic part 193SG is that after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a performance in which variable display is performed at a slower speed than usual. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A arrives, and the temporary stop notification performance period of the pseudo-continuous pattern is The stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. In addition, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of the series of symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance has a performance period of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is set to always end at a specific timing, regardless of which time is set.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect includes outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also outputs an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable displays to the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first, character A is output). This is an effect that notifies the player that the re-variable display of decorative symbols will be executed by displaying an image of character B for the second time, and an image of character C for the third time.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first variable display start count notification effect displays the variable display count of the decorative pattern, including the re-variable display count, on the image display device 5, and displays effect images of colors corresponding to the variable display count at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a performance that displays. In other words, the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display displays "x2" on the image display device 5, and displays blue effect images at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display displays "x3" on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed at both left and right ends of the image display device 5. The first variable display start number notification effect, which corresponds to the third re-variable display, displays "x4" on the image display device 5, and a red color is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification performance ends, a second variable display start number notification performance is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification performance. The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance that displays the variable display number of decorative symbols including the re-variable display number on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance.

After the second variable display start number informing effect is completed, the reach becomes again, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the normal reach effect is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14-23 (B), if it has been decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, Similarly to the case where the variation pattern shown in Figure 14-23 (A) is a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed once during variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a first pseudo continuous effect are performed after reaching reach, respectively. Temporary stop and re-variable display of the symbol, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start count notification performance, second variable display start count notification performance, and first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again and the second pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start number notification performance, second variable display start number notification performance are executed. be done. Then, after the second variable display start number notification performance is completed, the reach is reached again, and the temporary stop suggestion performance is executed. At this time, the super reach effect is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, if the first temporary stop notification performance is performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance is also performed during the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x3" (in the second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second first variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, if it has been decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect is performed after becoming a reach, and a pseudo continuous pattern is executed up to the second time. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, first variable display start number notification performance, and second variable display start number notification performance are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification performance is finished, the reach is reached again, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, temporary stop notification performance, re-variable display notification performance, A first variable display start number notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect, and a super reach effect are executed.

In addition, if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be performed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds). 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance, the second variable display start number notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are performed on the image display device 5. Differently, "x4" (in the third second variable display start number notification performance, "x4" of a smaller size than the third first variable display start number notification performance) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 14-26, if it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect is first executed. Suggestive performance is executed.

In addition, in this variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. . In other words, in the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are The performance period remains unchanged.

After the special temporary stop notification performance ends, the first re-variable display of decorative symbols is performed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the display of "x2" of a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect. ” will only be displayed.

After the first temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern, special temporary stop notification effect, and second variable display start notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and variable display of the decorative pattern, special After the temporary stop notification performance and the second variable display start number notification performance are executed, a super reach performance is further performed.

Note that as the second variable display start number notification effect, a smaller size "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 14-23(B), which is smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect. is executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-27, if it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion performance, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification performance, and the second variable display start number notification performance, the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern is executed. A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and a super reach effect is also executed.

Furthermore, as the second variable display start count notification effect for the third time, "x4", which is smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect, is displayed on the image display device 5 as in FIG. 14-23(B). is executed.

Although some of the details have been described above, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature section 193SG is a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop notification sound is emitted from the speaker 8L from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. This is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting from , 8R, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect refers to the temporary stop notification sound being output from the speakers 8L and 8R, as well as the number of times the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped, starting from the timing when the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating the background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third) This is a performance that informs the players. Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as a special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display; The sound output period (special temporary stop notification performance period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification performance.

The re-variable display notification effect means that in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image display device 5 displays an image of the character according to the number of re-variable displays (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, the character This is an effect that notifies the player that the variable display of decorative symbols will be executed again by displaying the image of character A, the image of character B if the second time, and the image of character C if the third time. Note that the performance period of the re-variable display notification performance (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is executed. seconds. As mentioned above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop/re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation level is set. Regarding the display notification performance, the expectation of a jackpot is set highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest expectation of jackpot is when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is a process for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during the first variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is a performance, and the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start count notification performance, the second first variable display This is an effect that displays "x3" in the start count notification effect and "x4" in the first variable display start count notification effect for the third time as well. Incidentally, the performance period of these first variable display start number notification performances is one second regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification performance is a performance for notifying the number of times variable display of decorative symbols including re-variable display has been started during the first variable display after the first variable display start number notification performance. , the number of times variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and "x2" in the second first variable display start number notification effect) This is a performance that displays "x3" in the performance and "x4" in the first variable display start number notification performance for the third time) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification performance. Incidentally, the performance period of these second variable display start number notification performances is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of decorative symbols including re-variable display.

FIG. 14-29(A) is a flowchart showing the preview effect determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous performance), the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of a preview performance is extracted, and a pseudo continuous performance is determined using the random number value and a table for determining the preview performance (not shown). The performance is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-29 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 20%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in preview effect and the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

Note that the cut-in preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 14-29 (F), and the group preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 14-29 (G). As shown, a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The expectation level of a jackpot is set higher than when only a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed, and the expectation level of a jackpot is set highest when both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance are performed as a preview performance (pseudo continuous). Jackpot expectation regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the performance: cut-in preview performance + group preview performance > group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (determined to execute at least one of the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS303; N), the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-sequential performance) is ended, and if execution of any preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined preview performance, sets a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance, and ends the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

Note that, as shown in FIG. 14-32, the executable period of these advance notice effects overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start number notification effect period. In particular, if it is decided to execute both a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance as a preview performance, these cut-in preview performances and group preview performance will be performed during the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start number notification performance period. The production is executed in duplicate.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if execution of any of the preview performances is determined in the preview performance determination process (for execution of pseudo-continuous performance), the same preview performance is executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods. (See Figures 14-29 to 14-31).

FIG. 14-30(A) is a flowchart showing the preview effect determination process (for when pseudo continuous effect is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 14-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of a preview performance is extracted, and the random number value and a table for determining a preview performance (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the preview performance will be executed in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not executed, and the notice to be executed. The performance is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-30 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined that the preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 5%, and the cut-in preview effect will be executed at a rate of 30%. The execution of the group preview effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach variation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in preview effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is off and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the preview effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group The execution of the preview performance is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature section 193SG, the expectation level of jackpot is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in preview effect nor the group preview effect is executed, and the cut-in preview effect is used as the preview effect. If only the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance are executed, the expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than if neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is performed, and if only the group preview performance is performed as the preview performance, the cut-in preview performance The jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case where only one is executed (jackpot expectation level regarding the preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the preview performance has not been decided (Step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance determination process (for when the pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is terminated, and if the execution of the preview performance has been decided (Step 193SGS313; Y), The determined preview performance is stored, a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set, and the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo continuous performance is not executed) is ended (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when performing a preview performance in the variable display where the pseudo continuous performance is not performed, the preview performance may be performed in any period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 14-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification performance in step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 14-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the performance control CPU 120 controls the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) at a rate of 20%. Then, execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach off), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification performance (execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is determined. (non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when performing a special temporary stop notification effect in a variable display that performs a pseudo continuous effect (according to the temporary stop of a decorative pattern, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the jackpot expectation level is set higher than the case (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed) (Jackpot expectation level in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: Special temporary stop notification effect execution > Special temporary stop notification effect non-execution) .

In addition, as mentioned above, if we pay attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image Only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, but if the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 After the first special background image is displayed, a second special background image is displayed in place of the first special background image on the image display device 5 in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image (updated to the second special background image), and in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (updated from the second special background image). (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, regarding the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level is set, so the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 The expectation of a jackpot is set to be the highest when is the third special background image, and the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. (Jackpot expectation regarding the special background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image) ).

FIG. 14-31(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 14-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification performance period to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of . On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification performance period is determined to be temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification performance period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). In other words, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in a variable display that performs a pseudo continuous effect, if the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1 second. The jackpot expectation level is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (Jackpot expectation level regarding the performance period of the temporary stop notification performance when the special temporary stop notification performance is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous performance) :Temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds)>Temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, in this feature section 193SG, a mode in which the temporary stop notification performance period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification performance period is It may be determined uniquely to one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Furthermore, although this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which the longer the temporary stop notification presentation period is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the short temporary stop notification presentation period, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher when the temporary stop notification performance period is shorter than when the temporary stop notification performance period is longer.

Next, the output mode of sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are enabled to output BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Among these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period. The first variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification presentation period.

Furthermore, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice performance sound and a group notice performance sound. Among these, the cut-in notice performance sound is output only during the cut-in notice performance execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice performance is decided, and the group notice performance sound is output when the execution of the group notice performance is decided. If there is, it will be output only during the group preview performance execution period.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 14-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is limited, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion production period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification production period, the speakers 8L and 8R output In addition to the first variable display start number notification sound, up to four types of sounds are output including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 14-33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the target is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. Note that from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern is not drawn as the image data 2. In other words, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed.

In addition, from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous pattern at the speed V1, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V1 to the display image data switching timing period, and is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

Immediately before the display image data switching timing, display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the center of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (speed 0) until the display image data switching timing, but from the display image data switching timing, it moves downward from the center of the image display device 5 at the above-mentioned speed V1. The moving display is performed at speed V3, which is faster than the above. Note that the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern moving at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 becomes non-display as the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. Note that the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the display image data switching timing, the saturated line is displayed again at the density D1 and then becomes hidden.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low).

In addition, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is improved by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1, compared to when the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2. becomes high (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the saturated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high) because the saturated lines are no longer displayed (not displayed).

As shown in FIG. 14-34, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the image display device 5 displays images from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 2. A moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is executed. The moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as shown in FIG. 14-33. They are the same. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification performance is executed, but during the execution period of the temporary stop notification performance, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. It will be hidden after that.

Furthermore, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a saturated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing using the image data 4. The display of the concentration line is such that the density of the concentration line (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern). , it will not be displayed from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of saturated lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The concentrated lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then are displayed at D2, which is higher in density than D1. That is, the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line becomes hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

For this reason, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period in which the pseudo continuous pattern does not stop, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the display image data switching timing, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. (Visibility: medium). Furthermore, as the concentration line density changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: Low). In addition, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the display of concentrated lines has ended (it is not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 14-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops and the decorative pattern is created by drawing image data 1. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern. The temporary stop notification effect image of the decorative pattern is then switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 14-35). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature section 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher (visibility: medium) than during the temporary stop suggestion performance execution period because the concentrated lines are once hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area of No. 5, the left and right decorative patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern in image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo continuous pattern toward the player side (this side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is also increased by the drawing of image data 2. The moving display is executed. At this time, since the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed (enlarged display) in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo continuous patterns become invisible again.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops in the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed moving on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of decorative designs is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 193SG will be described based on FIGS. 14-35 to 14-47.

First, if it is decided not to perform the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 14-35 (A) to 14-35 (C), a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display. After the elapse of time, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom at the speed V1 in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is based on the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1 that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (D). It moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 and becomes non-display. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (E). At this time, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The second movable body 193SG033 ceases to emit blue light while becoming invisible to the player. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) and 14-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retreat position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (I) and 14-36 (J). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-37(K) to 14-37(P), the first variable display of the decorative symbols is started again. Further, an image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances are overlapped with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A group preview performance is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the blue effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits blue light.

Note that the "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figure 14-37 (O) and Figure 14-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect ends, the second movable body 193SG033 finishes emitting light in blue, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retreat position. Further, as the first second variable display start count notification effect, an image of "x2" having a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5.

Shortly after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas are displayed, as shown in Figures 14-38 (R) to 14-38 (T). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

Then, when the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once or a normal reach jackpot variation pattern PB1-2, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (U), The pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect twice or more, then the display shown in FIG. 14-38 (V) As shown in , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (W) and FIG. 14-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting green light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-38 (X) and 14-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retreat position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which a pseudo-continuous pattern in which a plurality of holes are displayed explodes is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 14-39 (Z) and 14-39 (a). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-40(b) to 14-40(h), the second variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Further, an image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as a second first variable display start notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are Display of the green effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits green light.

Note that the "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden. (See Figures 14-40(f) and 14-40(g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, a second variable display start number notification effect is displayed with "x3" in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, which is smaller in size than the first variable display start number notification effect. image is displayed.

Shortly after the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas will be displayed, as shown in Figures 14-41(e) to 14-41(g). After the decorative pattern stops (swinging stops) in 5L and 5R and becomes a reach, as a third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is directed downward from the top in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. It is moving at a speed of V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the center portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. Note that the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 as a certain period of time passes.

If the variable display is a super reach miss variation pattern PA2-3 in which pseudo-continuous performance is executed only twice or a super reach jackpot variation pattern PB1-3, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (h). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. At this time, the density of concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect twice or more, then the display shown in FIG. 14-41 (i) As shown in , the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous pattern. Also, the saturated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-41(j) and 14-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative patterns are The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first presentation position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 14-41(k) and 14-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first production position to the retreat position, a plurality of pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. A crack is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which these multiple holes are displayed is displayed is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is constructed as shown in FIGS. 14-42 (m) and 14-42 (n). An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the main feature section 193SG, the alphabets of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be executed) are moving toward the player while being diffused.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-43(o) to 14-43(u), the third variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, an image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice performances or group notice performances overlap with the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start count notification performance. A preview performance is performed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification performance is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are The display of the red effect image starts at . Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first presentation position again and emits red light.

Note that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in an even larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See Figure 14-43(s) and Figure 14-43(t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" of a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. image is displayed.

Here, the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be explained. As shown in FIG. 14-44 (A) and FIG. 14-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo continuous pattern is directed downward from above at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. At the same time, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position, the velocity V1 increases from the top to the bottom at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative pattern). A pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) that is different from the moving pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2) is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Ru.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops as shown in Figure 14-44(C), and a temporary stop notification is sent to the surroundings of the pseudo continuous pattern. At the same time, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retreat position to the first production position is displayed in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops (pseudo continuous number) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits green light if it is temporarily stopped, and red if it is the third temporary stop. Further, at this time, the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern in the center of the image display device 5 is (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn in image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is now hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves directly below the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed. At the same time, a normal moving display of decorative symbols is executed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern starts moving at the speed V2 (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden from the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-44 (F) and 14-44 (G), after the saturated line is hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols will be displayed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed with the symbol, a reach effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative symbol indicating a jackpot or loss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the "medium" Decorative symbols with numbers other than "1", which is a winning combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, are stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the display of concentrated lines will continue even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line will continue to be displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot or miss combination (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect starts).

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in Figure 14-45, the left and right decorative symbols ("right" and "left" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R) During the temporary stop suggestion production period, the displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility than before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion production (visibility: low) due to the concentrated lines being displayed at a density of D1. . In addition, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further reduced by changing the concentration line density D2 (visibility Gender: Medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous pattern from the start timing of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). During the period, visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, during the remaining temporary stop notification performance period (on the player's side of the pseudo-series pattern) The display becomes invisible to the player during the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are created by partially overlapping displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. displayed at the center of the image display device 5, thereby creating a temporary stop notification effect. Visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed (moved and displayed toward the player) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they are no longer visible to the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display at the upper left of the image display device 5, resulting in the highest visibility state (visibility: high) becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 to 14-37, FIGS. 14-39 to 14-40, and FIGS. 14-42 to 14-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and Although a form in which the execution period of the re-variable display notification performance is different (the re-variable display notification performance is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification performance) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the stop notification performance and the execution period of the re-variable display notification performance may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 and 14-37, when a pseudo-continuous pattern explodes and moves toward the front on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern ( For example, the character "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the character as a re-variable display notification effect is displayed on the back side of a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern. start displaying the image. By doing this, the image of the character will gradually become visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbol, improving the performance effect, and furthermore, This makes it possible to transition between images without any discomfort.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (H) etc., as a temporary stop notification effect, an image in which the pseudo continuous pattern is cracked is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image itself explodes. Although the display mode is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying on the image display device 5 an image in which holes appear in the pseudo-continuous pattern, an image in which smoke and light are generated from these holes is displayed. Then, the image of smoke and light may make the pseudo continuous pattern difficult for the player to see, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo continuous pattern. By doing so as well, it becomes possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without causing any discomfort.

Next, if it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 14-46 (A) to 14-46 (C), after a while after the variable display starts, It becomes a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion performance, a moving display of a pseudo-continuous pattern indicating execution of a pseudo-continuous pattern is executed at a slower speed (velocity V1) than usual in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-presentation period ends, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 14-46 (D) to 14-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is finished, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first The variable display of the decorative design starts again. At this time, if it is decided to execute a cut-in notice performance or a group notice performance at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice performance or group notice performance is executed overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in performance and the group preview performance are finished, the first variable display start number notification performance is executed for the first time without executing the first variable display start number notification performance.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 14-47(I) to 14-47(N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern for the second time. At the same time as the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third time the decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed as the third special background image, as well as variable display of decorative patterns, cut-in preview performance, group preview performance, The third time the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, a reach effect is executed and decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-33 and 14-34, concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying concentrated lines at a density of D2, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is created by the temporary stop suggestion performance. It is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the temporary stop. Then, as a temporary stop notification effect, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible, the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It can increase the feeling of elation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-44, in the case where the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is supposed to temporarily stop, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, and it also alleviates the player's sense of disappointment that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the game's interest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-33, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, concentrated lines are displayed at a density of D2 before the switching timing of the display image data. Since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 afterwards, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the saturated line after the display image data is switched, the player is made aware that the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the saturated line. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feeling of disappointment that the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped.

In addition, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the combination of decorative symbols that will result in a jackpot or miss in combination with the left and right decorative symbols in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C will be displayed before it stops. Since the concentrated line is hidden, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the stop of the decorative pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (G) to 14-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first production position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern cracks and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern moves toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous pattern are By displaying the explosion, it is possible to further impress upon the player that the pseudo-continuous pattern has been temporarily stopped.

In particular, in this feature part 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first production position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern appear in front view. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo continuous pattern from becoming difficult for the player to see, and also notifies the player that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. can make an impression.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as an example of the pseudo-continuous pattern deforming, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of the pseudo-continuous pattern deforming, , the pseudo continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, circular or triangular), or the size of the pseudo continuous pattern may be different from before the temporary stop.

Further, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first production position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, if the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is moved to the first production position or a position different from the first production position, and when viewed from the front. It may be moved to a position overlapping with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first production position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5 due to the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

In addition, in the variable display of this characteristic part 193SG, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous effect up to three times, and each time the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and the variable display is executed again as a pseudo continuous effect, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. in accordance with the re-variable display number of times as a one-variable display start number notification effect. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-37(O), when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so "x2", "x3", etc. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-37 (O), Figure 14-40 (f), and Figure 14-43 (s), when displaying "x2" as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable The number of times the first variable display starts is determined by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green to display "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red to display "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification performance, and the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when executing the first variable display start number notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", " Although a form in which a portion of the displays such as "x3" and "x4" overlap when viewed from the front is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect is illustrated. Sometimes, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap with the second movable body 193SG033.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, 14-35, and 14-44, as a temporary stop suggestion performance, a pseudo continuous pattern as a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, and a concentrated line is displayed. , it becomes easy to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (as shown in FIG. 14-3). This can prevent the switching from image data to the image data shown in FIG. 14-4 from becoming unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo continuous pattern moves downward from the center of the image display device 5, so the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the display image data switching timing in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more strange.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform image data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4. The data can be combined to display an image on the image display device 5. In particular, pseudo-continuous patterns that are temporarily stopped as images are drawn as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1. Concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect are drawn as image data 4 with the lowest display priority, so decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns during moving display (during variable display), pseudo-continuous patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentrated lines as a stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I), and 14-36 (J), a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves toward the front, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed as shown in Figure 14-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially Display of "x2", etc.)) can enhance the production effect, and the decorative symbols on the left and right sides can be seen by the player during the first variable display start count notification production, so that the variable display can be performed again. This makes it easier for players to recognize.

In addition, the parts where the pseudo-continuous symbols explode and move as shown in Figures 14-35 (H), Figures 14-36 (I), Figures 14-36 (J), etc., and Figures 14-37 (O), The parts shown in Figure 14-37 (P) etc. in which the displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed in a moving manner are all moving displays toward the player (enlarged display). ), the effects of the temporary stop notification performance and the first variable display start number notification performance can be enhanced by these moving displays toward the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-33, in the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves at V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous pattern is V3, the player can determine whether the pseudo continuous pattern is before or after the temporary stop timing (before the display image data switching timing) depending on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern. This makes it easier for the player to understand whether it is later or not.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the moving speed of the pseudo-connection pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the pseudo-linking pattern after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player can determine whether the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. can be easily understood.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move from the top to the bottom, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop are moved by the player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), it becomes easier for the player to understand whether it is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-sequenced pattern, and the movement display of the pseudo-sequenced pattern is Misidentification can be prevented.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, although the form in which the moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern is different before and after the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous pattern is The moving direction of the pseudo continuous pattern may be the same before and after the continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop, it does not have to be toward the player (towards the player). good.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, in the case where the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, an image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo linked pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed), and the period in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing. The period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the timing may be different. In other words, in this invention, "the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (pseudo consecutive symbols in this feature section 193SG is different") includes the fact that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols is different, and the number of display frames for displaying pseudo consecutive symbols is different. It also includes the period in which the symbols are displayed (the production period in which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed).

Although the characteristic part 193SG of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the feature section 193SG, by displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). Although the embodiment has been exemplified to draw the player's attention to whether or not to temporarily stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 193SG-1, FIGS. As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5. By doing this, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous symbol will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the player can This makes it easier for the operator to recognize that the temporary stop was not made.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in FIG. In this case, a concentrated line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggestion effect. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in red. . By doing this, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect, so the effect The effect can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, a mode is exemplified in which a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance can be executed as a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modification example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern can be changed or changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It may also be possible to perform effects such as changing the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview performance, "x2" and "x" are used as the first variable display start number notification performance. 3" and "x4" are displayed moving (enlarged) toward the player, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the re-variable display will be performed due to the execution of the preview performance.

In addition, the feature section 193SG has a mode in which, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, variable display is executed again without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player on the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 is It is also possible to display a visibility inhibiting image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast wave, etc.), and then execute variable display again after the visibility inhibiting image is hidden. By doing so, the visibility inhibiting image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate, which is a transparent plate material and is capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility inhibiting image by injecting light from the outer circumferential side, is installed on the front side of the image display device 5 (the image display device) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 5 and the player). By doing so, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility-obstructing image is displayed on the light guide plate, thereby making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo-continuous symbols displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to enhance the impression and enhance the presentation effect of the visibility obstructing image.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, if the pseudo-continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved downward to the image display device 5 and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern is A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing, and the movement of the pseudo continuous pattern when returning to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 By making the speed different, the player can easily understand whether the pseudo-continuous pattern is before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after it has once passed through the center of the image display device 5. You may.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5, the display of concentrated lines may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo continuous symbol once passes through the center of the image display device 5 and then returns to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, pseudo continuous effects can be executed up to three times during variable display, and if pseudo continuous effects are executed three times during variable display, pseudo continuous effects can be executed twice. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the maximum number of times the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the variable display (in the case of this feature section 193SG) is shown as an example. 3 times) is executed, the reach effect will be different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the variable display result will have a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than other super reach reach effects). A high full-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be performed. In addition, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during variable display in this way, even if the full rotation reach effect is executed after the temporary stop notification effect without going through the re-variable display notification effect. good.

In addition, in the feature section 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) while the symbols showing the same numerical value are stopped on the left and right decorative symbols (ready-to-reach state). Although the form of temporary stopping has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Furthermore, as described above, as a pseudo-continuous presentation, a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern may be temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C. In addition, regarding the form in which a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo continuous effect, combinations of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", "112" The decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped with a specific combination, such as a combination of so-called misaligned stitches such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 225SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying a production image;
Suggestion performance execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests control to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means) A part that executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 13),
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
A pre-stage effect that moves and displays the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E));
The first subsequent stage performance is a success mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage stage performance has been executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(G) to 15-4(H), the pseudo-continuous pattern is (stopping part) and
A second later stage effect that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the first stage effect has been executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), the pseudo continuous pattern continues without a temporary stop) (the parts that are moved and hidden) and can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to understand whether the suggestive performance is successful or unsuccessful, and the interest of the suggestive performance can be improved.

Type 2 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 15-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed with priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (the part to be done) is to be done,
In the first latter stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to temporarily make the specific image difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G) (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance is displayed)
In the second latter stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed) part),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By making it difficult to see when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort at the time of stop display, and to emphasize that the stop display has been made, thereby improving the interest of the subsequent performance.

Type 3 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
When the first later stage effect is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily made difficult to see (for example, in the case shown in FIG. 15-6 As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter-stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the temporary stop notification effect is not displayed) (parts where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display on the background side of a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. By making the image difficult to view when the image is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the image is stopped and displayed, and it is also possible to emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 4 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as modification example 225SG-1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is given priority over a concentrated line). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and an effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 (F) to 15-7 (H) as modification example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image display is performed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the concentrated line continues to be displayed even after being hidden by device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Even in the second stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby improving the interest of the second stage performance.

Type 5 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 15-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is given priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern). (displayed part),
In the second latter stage effect, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-8(F) to 15-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, if the pseudo-sequential pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is changed by the moving display of the pseudo-sequential pattern. the part where the saturated line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a translucent effect display on a specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be displayed still. Also in the second stage performance, the effect display is displayed from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the second stage performance.

Form 6 gaming machine is
In the first stage effect, a translucent, highly transparent, and highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 15-1, a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed as a decorative pattern or pseudo-connection). (The part that is displayed with priority over the design)
In the first latter-stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transmission effect display whose transparency is lower than the high-transmission effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 15-9 as modification example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, so that a decorative pattern or a pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. parts that are difficult for players to see),
In the second latter-stage performance, the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification). is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to Form 1, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether or not a specific image that is moving and displayed will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is also possible to By displaying a low-transmission effect display when displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort during the stopped display and to emphasize that the stopped display has been performed, so that the interest of the subsequent performance can be improved.

Type 7 gaming machine is
The first subsequent performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the first stage performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped). (If you do so, the pseudo-connection pattern after the temporary stop will be displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 6, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of a specific image that is displayed in a stopped state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a stopped state.

Form 8 gaming machine is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), (the part where the concentrated line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the display),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 7, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation that the specific image will be displayed in a stopped state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the first stage performance.

Type 9 gaming machine is
Equipped with a preview performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13) capable of executing a preview performance that foretells the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first latter stage performance and the second latter stage performance, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (for example, as a modification example 225SG-5, the image display device is used as a temporary stop notification performance) 5, when the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the preview effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 8, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the preview performance from decreasing.

The game machine of form 10 is
The suggestive performance execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image whose left-right width dimension is L1 as a pseudo-coupled suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means to display the first stage effect and the first second stage effect, or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. A first suggestive effect that performs a second latter stage effect (for example, a pseudo connected suggestive effect shown in FIG. 15-11(C) as modified example 225SG-5), and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the second second stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestion performance (for example, the active display change suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F) as modification example 225SG-5) that performs the second stage performance, and
When executing the first subsequent stage effect as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-11(B), the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance along with an image as a pseudo-response suggestion effect),
When executing the first subsequent stage effect as the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmission effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 15-11(D) to 15-11(F)). As shown in , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 2 to 9, wherein the characteristic part is that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmission effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display size can be understood by the effect display. You can prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 15-1(A) to Figure 15-1(C), Figure 15-2(A) to Figure 15-2(C), Figure 15-3(A) to Figure 15-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 15-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 15-1(B), FIG. 15-2(B), and FIG. 15-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 15-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 15-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 15-1(C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated line in the main characteristic section 225SG has a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player cannot draw decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated line during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D). The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 15-2(C) and 15-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 14-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG will be described based on FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this characteristic part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although this invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. The pseudo continuous pattern can be temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern will temporarily stop by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress. It is possible to increase expectations for the temporary stop, and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic part 225SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the characteristic section 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, by drawing concentrated lines as image data 2 and drawing decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3, the image display device 5 Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 225SG-1, FIGS. 15-5 (A) to 15 -5(C), by drawing saturated lines as image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-connected patterns with priority over saturated lines (concentrated lines are not displayed as decorative patterns or (displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo continuous pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(A) to 15-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to prevent the temporary stop from occurring. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-7(A) to 15-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentrated lines during the temporary stop suggestion production, and when the pseudo-continuation symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production. Regarding this, an example has been given in which concentrated lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, even if the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIGS. 15-9(A) to 15-9(C) as modification example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 15-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying concentrated lines with relatively high transmittance during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will make a temporary stop. You can improve your interest. When the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation (when the temporary stop notification presentation is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the effect image for notifying a temporary stop in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to notify that the pseudo continuous symbol has temporarily stopped through the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to a pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, it may be possible to execute a preview effect (see FIG. 14-29 in the feature section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a different effect from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect. . It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview performance that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion performance, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 15-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change preview effect, as shown in FIG. 15-11(F), the display mode of the image display device 5 changes. It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-coupling suggestion production as a preview production, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification along with an image as a pseudo-coupling suggestion production on the image display device 5, While once making the image as a pseudo-coupled suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing an active display change notice effect as a notice effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) with a shorter display size than the image for the pseudo-link suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect can be blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. This can prevent things from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation symbol as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image whose left and right width dimension is L1 is displayed as a continuous effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, the transmittance is not 0% at the top of the image display device 5 together with the image as the pseudo-connection suggestion effect (for example, the transmittance is An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 225SG in embodiment of this invention)
Next, the characteristic section 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characteristic section 225SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. Note that, in this feature section 225SG, descriptions of portions that have the same configuration as the above-mentioned feature section of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the feature section 225SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in Figure 15-1(A) to Figure 15-1(C), Figure 15-2(A) to Figure 15-2(C), Figure 15-3(A) to Figure 15-3(C). For example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 15-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG, and FIG. 15-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Yes, and FIG. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), image data 1 includes an effect image (temporary stop notification This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 15-1(A), the image data 2 is transmitted from the outer periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display saturated lines toward.

As shown in FIG. 15-1(B), FIG. 15-2(B), and FIG. 15-3(A), image data 3 shows a pseudo continuous pattern on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a moving display from the top to the bottom. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than during the moving display (as shown in Figure 15-1 (B), the left and right sides of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the temporary stop are The width dimension is a, and the top and bottom width dimensions are b, but as shown in Figure 15-2 (B), the left and right width dimension of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the top and bottom width dimension is y. (y>b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 displays the data in place of the pseudo-continuous pattern. This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (designs from "1" to "9" in this feature section 225SG) from the top to the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), the image data 4 is a pseudo continuous pattern directed downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping. This is data drawn to display a moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set for these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. An image is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1 and an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3. It is displayed as a lower layer image than the image.

Therefore, when executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figure 15-1(C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated line) changes from the image based on image data 3 (from the top to the bottom of the pseudo-continuous pattern). It is now displayed with priority over the movement display). Furthermore, since the concentrated line in the main characteristic section 225SG has a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player cannot draw decorative symbols or pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentrated line during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops, the image based on image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is changed to image data 3, as shown in FIGS. 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D). The image is displayed with priority over the image based on the image (the pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for temporary stop notification becomes non-displayed when a predetermined period of time elapses before the re-variable display starts.

Note that the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the main feature section 225SG is set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIGS. 15-2(C) and 15-2(D). As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stopping, an image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-3 (C). ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (the moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward from the center of the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls whether the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped at the start timing of the variable display or not. The image data to be stopped is set and variable display is performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 14-33 of the above-mentioned feature section 193) for the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop. The image data to be displayed is switched from the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) to the image data in which the pseudo continuous pattern is not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in the main feature section 225SG will be described based on FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swinging stops) and becomes a reach. Thereafter, as a first temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern moves from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), the image display device 5 responds to the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

Then, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-4(F). At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 225SG, during the variable display of 1, the pseudo continuous pattern is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5, and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. It is possible to perform a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. The temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily made invisible, and if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as an image without displaying the temporary stop notification effect image. Since the display device 5 continues to move downward and display the display, it disappears, so that the player can confirm whether the temporary stop suggestion performance is successful (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) or failed (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ), which makes it easier to understand and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

Furthermore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, concentrated lines with high transmittance are displayed on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the moving and displayed pseudo-continuous symbol will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the player's discomfort at the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo continuous pattern has temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern can be improved.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a, and the vertical width dimension is b) On the other hand, when temporarily stopped, the left and right width dimensions are x (x>a) and the vertical width dimensions are y (y>b)), so it is possible to improve the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern, and also to improve the visibility of the pseudo-continuous pattern. Temporary stops can be emphasized more.

In addition, in this characteristic part 225SG, a form is exemplified in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in a larger size than before the pseudo-continuous pattern was temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. Although this invention is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo-continuous pattern from the timing when the pseudo-continuous pattern has temporarily stopped. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. The pseudo continuous pattern can be temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern will temporarily stop by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress. It is possible to increase expectations for the temporary stop, and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped is increased by moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, it is possible to change the color of the concentrated lines or increase the number of concentrated lines to be displayed (increase the density of concentrated lines) as the temporary stop suggestion progresses. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo continuous pattern temporarily stops may be increased.

Although the characteristic part 225SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. .

For example, in the characteristic section 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, by drawing concentrated lines as image data 2 and drawing decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3, the image display device 5 Although a mode in which concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 225SG-1, FIGS. 15-5 (A) to 15 -5(C), by drawing saturated lines as image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-connected patterns with priority over saturated lines (concentrated lines are not displayed as decorative patterns or (displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo continuous pattern).

By doing this, as shown in FIGS. 15-6(A) to 15-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is placed at the center of the image display device 5. By displaying them moving toward the area, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, and the concentrated lines make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. This can be prevented.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), At the same time that the saturated line is hidden, the pseudo-continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Furthermore, since the transparency of the temporary stop notification effect image is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the temporary stop notification effect image until a predetermined period has elapsed after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player can visually see the pseudo-continuous pattern that is larger in size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to prevent the temporary stop from occurring. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, after hiding the concentrated line, the image display device displays the pseudo-continuous symbol without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. Although a mode in which the display is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-7(A) to 15-7( As shown in H), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping and becomes hidden. On the other hand, the concentrated lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden, up to the timing at which the variable display stops.

By doing this, similar to Modification Example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern, a temporary stop suggestion that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. It can improve the interest of the performance. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentrated lines during the temporary stop suggestion production, and when the pseudo-continuation symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production. Regarding this, an example has been given in which concentrated lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as modification example 225SG-3, concentrated lines are displayed with priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, even if the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying the decorative pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will temporarily stop. You can improve your interest. If the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous pattern can also be caused by continuous display of concentrated lines for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5. It is possible to increase the interest in determining whether or not to make a temporary stop. Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation, the entire display area of the image display device 5 temporarily stops when the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops, similar to the feature section 225SG. By displaying an effect image for informing the player of a stop, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort during the temporary stop.

In addition, in the feature section 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily visually recognized. Although the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIGS. 15-9(A) to 15-9(C) as modification example 225SG-4, pseudo-continuous pattern When the vehicle has temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%, etc.) than the concentrated line.

In other words, as shown in Figure 15-10, during the period in which the concentrated line is displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern), the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, , the aforementioned 50%), the player can easily see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols over the concentrated line, while the period during which the temporary stop notification effect image is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect ( During the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbols), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated lines (for example, 20% as mentioned above), so the player is more likely to see the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols than during the period when the concentrated lines are displayed The continuous pattern may be difficult to visually recognize. Although not particularly shown in this modification example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as in other characteristic parts and modifications. The effect image for is not displayed.

By doing this, similar to the feature section 225SG, by displaying concentrated lines with relatively high transmittance during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous pattern will make a temporary stop. You can improve your interest. When the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion presentation (when the temporary stop notification presentation is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the effect image for notifying a temporary stop in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and also to notify that the pseudo continuous symbol has temporarily stopped through the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, in the feature section 225SG, a mode is exemplified in which a temporary stop suggestion performance and a temporary stop notification performance can be executed as performances related to a pseudo continuous performance during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As modification example 225SG-5, during variable display, a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is used as a different effect from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects (see Figure 14-29 in feature section 193SG) ) may be executable. It should be noted that these preview effects can be executed when a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, execution of the preview effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot by executing the preview effect, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting the execution of the preview performance, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being lowered by the temporary stop notification effect image and the interest of the preview performance to decrease.

In addition, as a preview performance that can be executed during variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as modification example 225SG-5, for example, when a pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion performance, the next As a result of the pseudo-coupling suggestion production, a pseudo-coupling suggestion production that further suggests that the pseudo-coupling pattern temporarily stops, and a variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, at the lower center of the image display device) An active display area 225SG005F is provided that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display It may also be possible to execute an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode will change.

In this way, when performing a pseudo-continuous suggestion performance as a preview performance, for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the temporary stop of the image display device 5, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo-connection suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5, and a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. In other words, the display of the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect starts from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuation symbol, but the image as a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. This is from the time when it was hidden.

On the other hand, when executing an active display change preview performance as a preview performance, the pseudo-continuous pattern is From the timing of the stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5 displays an effect image from the right side of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left and right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change preview performance, an arrow flying from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, as shown in FIG. 15-11(E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and if the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change preview effect, as shown in FIG. 15-11(F), the display mode of the image display device 5 changes. It is only necessary that the arrow flying from the right side pass toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display and then disappear.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-coupling suggestion production as a preview production, by displaying an effect image for temporary stop notification along with an image as a pseudo-coupling suggestion production on the image display device 5, While once making the image as a pseudo-coupled suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing an active display change notice effect as a notice effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) with a shorter display size than the image for the pseudo-link suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect can be blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. This can prevent things from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification example 225SG-5, when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, a pseudo-continuation suggestion effect is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation symbol as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. Although an example has been exemplified in which an image whose left and right width dimension is L1 is displayed as a continuous effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when performing a pseudo-connection suggestion effect as a preview effect, the transmittance is not 0% at the top of the image display device 5 together with the image as the pseudo-connection suggestion effect (for example, the transmittance is An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by changing the display mode such as the pending memory display at the end timing of the variable display, the display device 5 temporarily stops the symbol. The variable display result corresponding to the suspended memory display can be executed as a variable display result that suggests a jackpot, and can be displayed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , a case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the pending memory display changes (the pending memory display change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the pending memory display change notification pattern stops. It may also be possible to perform a performance equivalent to the performance (suggestive performance in the present invention).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, a pattern (pseudo-series effect) that notifies that a pseudo-sequence effect will be executed is used as one of the plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. Although a mode in which a pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to a jackpot depending on the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the background image change is to be performed (background image change notification symbol) stops on the image display device 5. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion effect in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG is made based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern stops. A corresponding effect (suggestion effect in this invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the feature section 193SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

Further, in this specification, a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are illustrated as examples of the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may also be implemented by combining these plurality of characteristic parts and modification examples. Alternatively, only one feature or modification may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic section 193SG or the characteristic section 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-continuous effect) that notifies that a pseudo-continuous performance will be executed may be used as one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although a mode in which the symbols (symbols) are temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A production corresponding to the temporary stop suggestion production in the feature section 193SG or the feature section 225SG (suggestion production in the present invention) is executed for the stop of a pattern that is suggestible and that suggests that a specific setting value is set. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning hole, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First starting port switch, 22B Second starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First holding indicator, 25B Second holding indicator, 25C Normal figure holding indicator, 30 Batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control section.

Claims (2)

Variably displaying multiple types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine that is capable of
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
A specific performance execution means that executes a specific performance that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information and then resumes the variable display after the variable display of the performance identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed;
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests temporary suspension of the specific performance identification information;
Notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies temporary suspension of the specific performance identification information;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of the predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and the second period is during the predetermined period and is subsequent to the first period. , performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display, and in a subsequent period, performing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display;
The suggestive performance execution means sets the specific performance identification information and performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first state with low visibility by effect display, and then sets the specific performance identification information and the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information to a first state in which visibility is lower than the first state. It is possible to execute a production that sets the second state as the suggestion production,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance that makes performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information invisible,
The special performance execution means is capable of executing, as the special performance, a performance that displays a display corresponding to the restart of the variable display,
In the gaming machine, the display area of the effect display is larger in the second state than in the first state. A gaming machine that variably displays a plurality of types of performance identification information, derives and displays a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. hand,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
A specific performance that executes a specific performance that temporarily stops special identification information different from the performance identification information and then restarts the variable display from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information until the derivation and display of the display result. means of execution,
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests temporary suspension of the special identification information;
a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect to notify temporary suspension of the special identification information;
Special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after execution of the notification performance,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
The second guidance display is performed during a first period of the predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, and the second period is during the predetermined period and is subsequent to the first period. , performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display, and in a subsequent period, performing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display;
The suggestive performance execution means executes a performance in which the special identification information and the performance identification information are set to a first state with low visibility by displaying an effect and then set to a second state with even lower visibility than the first state. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned suggestive performance,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance that makes the performance identification information invisible as the notification performance,
The special performance execution means is capable of executing, as the special performance, a performance that displays a display corresponding to the restart of the variable display,
In the gaming machine, the display area of the effect display is larger in the second state than in the first state.